JP2020185296A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.SOLUTION: The number of performance patterns (performances B, C) executable as a first performance in a ready-to-win performance after execution of re-variation display in a pseudo continuous performance is smaller than the number of performance patterns (performances A to C) as the first performance before execution of re-variation display in a pseudo continuous performance in a variable display performance in which the pseudo continuous performance is executed. A ratio of control to a jackpot game state in execution of a performance B or a performance C in a ready-to-win performance after execution of re-variation display in a pseudo continuous performance is higher than a ratio of control to a jackpot game state in execution of the performances A to C in a ready-to-win performance before execution of re-variation display in a pseudo continuous performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information.

In this type of gaming machine, a combination of a plurality of symbols constituting the jackpot display result (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) from the start of variable display of symbols to the derivation display of the display result. It is possible to execute a reach effect that variablely displays the middle symbol while two of the symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed, and for example, the +3rd of the left and right symbols on the symbol combination effective line. There were cases where the type of production of the development destination was different depending on whether the middle symbol passed or when the +5th middle symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-122194

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the numbers of the middle symbols and the production type of the development destination have a one-to-one correspondence, so that the numbers of the middle symbols that have passed on the symbol combination valid line indicate the development destination. Since it is easy to predict the type of production, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

The game machine of means 1
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol), an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ) Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of identification information constituting the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can set the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to the reach mode) capable of executing the reach effect for variably displaying one identification information.
The effect executing means is
When the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information in the reach effect becomes the first number (for example, two), the first effect (for example, the effects A to C) is performed. When it is executed and when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information in the reach effect becomes the second number (for example, four) larger than the first number. The second effect (for example, effects D and E) may be executed.
It is possible to execute a specific effect that executes the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times after temporarily stopping the display from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. Yes (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pseudo continuous effect),
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display is larger than the number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. Less,
When the first effect is executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is the ratio of the first effect controlled in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. Is higher than the rate controlled to the advantageous state when is executed (for example, in the variable display effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the first reach effect after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect is the first. The number of effect patterns that can be executed as an effect (effects B and C / see Fig. 9-9) is the number of effect patterns that can be executed as the first effect in the reach effect before executing the revariable display in the pseudo-continuous effect (effect A). ~ C / see Fig. 9-8), and the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect B or effect C is executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display in the pseudo continuous effect is pseudo. It is higher than the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state when the effects A to C are executed in the reach effect before the revariable display is executed in the continuous effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first effect is executed after the revariable display is executed, the number of types of the first effect that can be executed is small, but the first effect is executed before the revariable display is executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the case where the revariable display is performed, the player can be interested in whether the first effect is executed before or after the revariable display is executed. Therefore, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the revariable display is executed a specific number of times out of a predetermined number of times in the specific effect, the effect executing means is when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed in the reach effect becomes the second number. However, the second effect may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9, in the variable display based on the effect control patterns PTA-20 and 21, the reach mode is reached in the third revariable display. Later, even when the "tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the part that develops into a super reach effect without executing the effect E)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the revariable display is executed a specific number of times, the second effect may not be executed even when the identification information of the second number is switched and displayed in the reach effect. It can be expected that a high-quality production will be performed.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The effect executing means can make it difficult to visually recognize the one identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach effect in the second effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect control pattern PTA-. In the variable display effect based on 10-12 and 14-19, after executing any of the effects D to E, the variable display mode of the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode is set as the high-speed variable display mode. Parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times the switching display of one identification information is performed.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect at the first timing for executing the first effect and the second timing for executing the second effect.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the first timing is lower than the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the second timing (for example). In the reach mode, when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, that is, the effect control for executing the pseudo continuous effect at the first timing for executing the first effect. When the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, rather than the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the patterns PTA-14 to 16. That is, the part where the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19 that execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect is higher).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect (for example, the tempai symbol in the reach mode is an even number. Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the ratio of the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern in which the first effect A to C is executed and the effect D which is the second effect ~ E is executed The part where the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern is executed is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the effect executing means executes the first effect and the second effect after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach effect. It is possible to stop and display the combination of a plurality of identification information constituting the specific display result (for example, in the effect control pattern PTA-1 and the effect control pattern PTA-7, the effects A to E in the reach mode. After the Tempai symbol passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the Tempai symbol may be stopped and displayed on the effective line and become a big hit).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The effect setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be set to any one of a plurality of effect settings including the first effect setting and the second effect setting different from the first effect setting) is in a normal game state. (For example, a part in which the first effect mode is set in the case of low accuracy and low base state) and the second effect mode is set in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is executed) is provided.
The effect executing means can execute the reach effect regardless of which of the first effect setting and the second effect setting is set by the effect setting means.
When the second effect is set, the second effect is executed, while when the second effect is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode). , As the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the effect control pattern that can execute the effects A to C that was made executable in the first effect mode cannot be selected).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution probability of the first effect can be made different according to the effect setting, so that the interest is improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the variation pattern is normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern in the feature part 052SG. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot reliability of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is a big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), (B) is a big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table. Is. (A) Disengagement fluctuation pattern determination table (for 1 or less reserved storage), (B) Disengagement fluctuation pattern determination table (for 2 to 4 pending storage), (C) Disengagement fluctuation pattern determination table (for 1 or less) It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table (for high base medium) for detachment (for 5 or more hold memory), (D). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is an effect control pattern determination table (for N reach), (B) is an effect control pattern determination table (for S reach α), and (C) is an effect control pattern determination table (for S reach β). (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect control pattern (for S reach γ), (E) is an effect reliability, and (F) is a tempai symbol reliability). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the effect control pattern type, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow (1/2) of a variable display effect. It is a figure which shows the flow (2/2) of a variable display effect. (A) to (L) are diagrams showing an operation example of the variable display effect. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing a modification of the feature portion 052SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 103SG003 and the glass. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which the (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, on the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 103SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 103SG133 that lights up when in a probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is in the probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. When each variation pattern is assigned, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of the super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination ratio of any of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “bL.” Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is set to 103SGSa011 without executing 103SGSa010. move on.

In 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processing of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timer-out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timer-out (103SGSa034; Y), the set value error error occurs. The first display unit 103SG029A, the second display unit 103SG029B, the third display unit 103SG029C, and the fourth display unit 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of the above or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect when the effect result can be either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, that is, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. Further, an image Z2 showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (number of paragliders destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) can be obtained. It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when the normal reach is achieved, so that the first special pattern with a low expectation of becoming a super reach {reach notice (low), first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach. Notice (high), second special mode}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of order than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation of jackpot than pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Further, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the character type appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when the player falls, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice in the case of (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. Three determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it is easy to win. Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with high expectation for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery is performed in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Judgment values are assigned, pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, and patterns. Four determination values are assigned to the PT-5, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to the pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be set high (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set high (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery on whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, the winning pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. Is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If the determination (103SGS302) is made and any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process ends.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In the 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result. (Effect of a special aspect) can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of a specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery for setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled by a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the effect during the variable display from being lowered due to the excessive priority given to the reach notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, in the case of executing the variable display during effect when the super reach fluctuation pattern and the set value are set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach fluctuation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is the reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, especially in the case of a jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease and the production will be inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion as a tendency of the effect during variable display, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, it is shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) and 8-17 (B). It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 8- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see Fig. 8-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It becomes impossible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is set to the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B. Executable part.) And
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the effect is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period spanning a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As an example, a form in which the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (having no corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and FIG. 8-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, the random numbers for determining the effect type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is used to determine whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

Although not particularly shown in the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is produced based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution rate of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image in which the paraglider in which appears is moving, etc.), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 8-18 at a different production timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 8-18 (for example, the ending image of the jackpot) is presented at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as the second embodiment, the first period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. However, it is also possible to include a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern as an execution target of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table is used according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (B). Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21 (A).

If it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) and 8-22 (B). The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided as pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 2% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 56.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be one of -4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach] as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Or, while the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is due to the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the production is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratios of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period are executed. It is difficult to continuously execute setting suggestions with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display in-stage effect executed in the first period and in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute reach notices with the variable display effect. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period, although the mode in which the reach notice is executed is different from the case of executing the variable display. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The ratio for determining the execution of the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display during effect (first variable display during effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when it is not executed), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, a non-execution may be determined in which neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed.

When it is possible to determine non-execution in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
One of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any of the plurality of types of effect modes. It is equipped with a setting suggestion based on, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 8-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, is executed at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode. Therefore, the advantageous state is obtained at a timing close to one game result. Expectations can be raised suitably.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests a setting, and a setting and a type suggested in the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 2 as a second embodiment). As shown in 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and 8 to 28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, The part that executes the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing the variable display effect in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even number settings 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case where the effect is executed. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.

Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to avoid excessive execution of the setting suggestion. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, as compared with the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special aspect being executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.

In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. In, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

In Example 2, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, it is set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period. Set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Of these, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the first set value and the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect during the second period (appearance status) are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of which of the low setting value and the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the mode in which the ratio (appearance status) is not different from the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance status) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The ratio (appearance status) of executing the setting suggestion may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Further, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different ratios depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed during the second period is set for the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the pachinko machine 1 times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the effect is being variablely displayed the same number of times. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period to be executed in the first period are shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for each of the variable display during production executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 30% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the first period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of 1 to 6. Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the effect during variable display, and the variable display is executed in the second period. The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the production type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type differs between the set value (for example, set value 6). , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the effect type of the pattern PT-9 rather than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period. Although the embodiment in which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period and the case where the effect is executed in the second period The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during the effect), an example of a form in which the reach notice is executed at a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display during effect (first variable display during effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period and the variable display during effect executed during the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect that the reach notice is executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the variable display effect in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, there are cases where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and a case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the middle effect, it is set between the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display during the second period is executed, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period In each of the second period and the second period, a mode of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. It is possible to execute the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33.

As shown in FIGS. 8-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the identified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, it proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern In this case, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified by 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in the 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution decision table during variable display in which the fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. It is set so that the larger the value is, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If execution is not decided in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 3%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) in the case of performing is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). ~ PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is executed and executing the variable display during effect in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the criteria for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display during the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. The part where the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not)
A variable display means capable of executing variable display according to a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display during effect process, and a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes variable display) and
Predetermined effect determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is the pattern PT-1 to PT-9. The part that decides one from),
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, Example). As shown in FIG. 8-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period, the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determining the effect type of the effect (see 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variable display variation pattern and the pachinko gaming machine The effect type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value set to 1 (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, the effect control CPU 120 gives a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, in the first period, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a mode of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, a mode of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. An example has been made in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and It is possible to execute the effect during variable display in the third period, which is after the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which the fluctuation pattern is. Variable display is being performed according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, .... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit from being lowered due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferred because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the normal reach or the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined in preference to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion is made according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although Examples 1 to 4 of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these Examples 1 to 4, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in Examples 1 to 4, the embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and the setting suggestion are provided. It may be feasible over a plurality of variable displays (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can be used. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when the push sensor 35B detects a specific operation of operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promoting effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a mode in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the symbol being variably displayed stops, a character notice in which a character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various advance notices can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as up notices and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is increased by making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by changing the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including priority. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of the set values 1 to 6 is set is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be satisfied, high probability gaming state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a big hit game state, high probability low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example) , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

(Characteristic part SG052)
Next, the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment as the feature unit 052SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-10. In the feature section 052SG of the present embodiment, the configurations different from those of the first to fourth embodiments of the feature section 103SG will be mainly described, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 052SG. The fluctuation patterns of the feature unit 052SG include a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1 to 4), a normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and a super reach α. The fluctuation pattern of the outlier (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of the super reach β (PA2-3) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). , Super reach γ out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), and small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) are prepared in advance.

Of these, the fluctuation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ are such that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is restarted from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the display result is derived and displayed. As a result, it is a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed to make one variable display look like a pseudo-multiple variable display, and the variation pattern of super reach β is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. It is regarded as a fluctuation pattern that makes it appear as if the variable display was performed twice in a pseudo manner, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is such that the pseudo continuous effect was executed twice and the variable display was performed three times in a pseudo manner. It is said to be a fluctuation pattern shown in.

The feature unit 052SG exemplifies a mode in which the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is set only to the variation pattern of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous effect is provided. The fluctuation pattern to be executed may also be set to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, and by doing so, when the pseudo-continuous production is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, it can be expected to develop into a super reach. become.

Further, in the variation pattern of super reach β, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once, and in the variation pattern of super reach γ, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect can be arbitrarily changed, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed 3 times or more and the variable display is executed 4 times or more may be prepared in advance.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the feature unit 052SG, the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is set high (big hit). Expectation: Super Reach γ> Super Reach β> Super Reach α> Normal Reach), Normal Reach Fluctuation Patterns and Super Reach Fluctuation Patterns, the longer the fluctuation time and the more times the pseudo-continuous production is executed, the higher the expectation of big hits. It has become.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is used as the determination value. Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), the range 1 of the determination value of MR3 is common regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. Of ~ 997, 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 201 to 600 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), 601 Up to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4).

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the determination value of MR3 is common regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 101 to 250 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). 251 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) or the super reach γ. It is set to be higher than the ratio for determining the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (PB1-4). Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) is the super reach. It is set to be higher than the ratio for determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the α jackpot.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach γ or super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit". In the case of "A", the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ is executed, it is referred to as “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the player's expectation that it will be.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the range of the determination values of MR3 is common regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. Of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided and set as the variation pattern of the small hit. With values 1 to 6, the fluctuation pattern of small hits may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β and the variation pattern (PA2-4) out of reach γ is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), it is common when the set value is any of 1 to 6. Of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1). ), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, 951. Up to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), it is common when the set value is any of 1 to 6. Then, out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-). 1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α out of line (PA2-2), and 851 to 950 are assigned to the variation pattern of Super Reach β out of line (PA2-3). 951 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of super reach γ.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), it is common to any of 1 to 6 of the set values. Of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1). ), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, 951. ~ 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of super reach γ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern out of super reach γ (PA2-4), a predetermined range within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), the determination value of MR3 is common to any of the set values 1 to 6. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2-4).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 950 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 951 to 997, are assigned to fluctuation patterns that are out of super reach γ, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of super reach is common regardless of the set value. Since it is determined by the determination ratio of, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In addition, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reach. The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-1). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 052SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C), a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of pending storages. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the number and the second special symbol is executed, the variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number and the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol).

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 052SG, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2-2) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be any of 1 to 6. And the range of random numbers assigned to PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the feature unit 052SG illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation pattern is determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The feature unit 103SG described above exemplifies a form in which whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Then, when the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern other than the non-reach is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is prepared in advance based on the special figure fluctuation time, the variable display result, etc. of the determined fluctuation pattern. It is decided by lottery which of the multiple reach effects to be executed.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (052SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (052SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown). The various command data and various flags stored in association with "" are shifted upward by one buffer number (052SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 052SGS271 (052SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (052SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (052SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (052SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (052SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 052SGS272 or 052SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (052SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (052SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 052SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 may have, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) aligned with. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers including "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "777", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and a stop symbol determination table (illustrated) in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. (Omitted) may be used to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

When determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 9-6 (F). The mode is the reach mode (variable display continues for decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed when the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of the jackpot combination. When the two decorative symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as tempai symbols or reach symbols) that form a part of the jackpot combination that is stopped and displayed are odd-numbered symbols, than when they are even-numbered symbols. The jackpot reliability (big hit expectation) is high, and when the tempai symbol is a "7" symbol, the jackpot reliability (big hit expectation) is higher than when the tempai symbol is an odd number symbol or an even symbol other than "7". ) Is high, and the stop symbol is determined.

The feature unit 052SG exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot reliability (big hit expectation) is higher when the tempai symbol is an odd number symbol than when it is an even number symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the stop symbol may be determined so that the jackpot reliability (big hit expectation) is substantially the same depending on whether the tempai symbol is an odd number symbol excluding the “7” symbol or an even number symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern designation command read from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area in 052SGS275 (052SGS277). If the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (052SGS277; Y), an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is selected (052SGS278), and the process proceeds to 052SGS286. When the fluctuation pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (052SGS277; N), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (052SGS279). When the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (052SGS279; Y), it is extracted by using the effect control pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) based on the determined variable display result and the stop symbol. The production control pattern (process table) corresponding to the numerical value of the random number for determining the effect control pattern is selected (052SGS280), and the process proceeds to 052SGS286.

When the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach fluctuation pattern (052SGS279; N), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern (052SGS281). When the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern (052SGS281; Y), the effect control pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 9-6 (B) is used based on the determined variable display result and the stop symbol. , Select the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the numerical value of the random number for determining the extracted effect control pattern (052SGS282), and proceed to 052SGS286.

When the fluctuation pattern is not the super reach α fluctuation pattern (052SGS281; N), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern (052SGS283). When the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern (052SGS283; Y), the effect control pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 9-6 (C) is used based on the determined variable display result and the stop symbol. , Select the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the numerical value of the random number for determining the extracted effect control pattern (052SGS284), and proceed to 052SGS286.

When the fluctuation pattern is not the super reach β fluctuation pattern (052SGS283; N), since the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ, the effect shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) is based on the determined variable display result and the stop symbol. Using the control pattern determination table D, an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the extracted random number for determining the effect control pattern is selected (052SGS285), and the process proceeds to 052SGS286.

After executing the processes of 052SGS278, 052SGS280, 052SGS282, 052SGS284, 052SGS285, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (052SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (052SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (for example, a variable display image of a decorative pattern and a background image). Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (052SGS288). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (052SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (052SGS290).

In the variable display start setting process (S171) described with reference to FIG. 9-5, the feature unit 052SG does not execute the process (103SGS278-103SGS280) related to the variable display effect determination process performed by the feature unit 103SG. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the feature unit 052SG also executes a process related to the variable display effect determination process performed by the feature unit 103SG, that is, the variable display effect. It may be possible.

(Variable display effect)
Next, the variable display effect performed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to a non-reach variation pattern (any of PA1-1 to 4) corresponding to the variation pattern specification command read by 052SGS275 in a one-to-one manner. While selecting the effect control pattern to be performed, if it is a variation pattern other than non-reach, that is, a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern that executes the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect control patterns PTA-1 to prepared in advance One of the 21 production control patterns is selected.

Specifically, in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, one of the effect control patterns PTA-1 to 7 is selected from the effect control pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and the supermarket is selected. In the case of the reach α fluctuation pattern, one of the effect control patterns PTA-8 to 12 is selected from the effect control pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and the super reach β variation pattern is selected. In the case of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, one of the effect control patterns PTA-13 to 19 is selected using the effect control pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 9-6 (C). Using the effect control pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), one of the effect control patterns PTA-20 to 21 is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (D), the effect control pattern determination table for determining the effect control pattern for executing the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern. Is an effect control pattern determination table A (for normal reach) used when is a normal reach variation pattern, and an effect control pattern determination table B (super reach α) is used when the variation pattern is a super reach α variation pattern. (For) and the effect control pattern determination table C (for super reach β) used when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, and the effect used when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ fluctuation pattern. A control pattern determination table D (for super reach γ) is prepared in advance, and in these effect control pattern determination tables A to D, a random number value for effect control pattern determination is set for each variation pattern. A predetermined random number value in the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the effect control pattern determination table A, when the variable display result is a big hit, five determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-1 to control the effect. Eight judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-2, ten judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-3, 15 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-4, and the effect control pattern PTA is assigned. Twenty-five determination values are assigned to −5, 35 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-6, and two determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-7. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 35 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-1, 25 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-2, and the effect control pattern PTA- 15 judgment values are assigned to 3, 10 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-4, 8 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-5, and the effect control pattern PTA-6 is assigned. Five determination values are assigned, and two determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-7.

In this way, in the effect control pattern determination table A, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6 are determined in order. When the ratio becomes high and the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratio decreases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each effect control pattern increases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6 (big hit reliability: PTA). -1 <PTA-2 <PTA-3 <PTA-4 <PTA-5 <PTA-6). Further, regarding the effect control pattern PTA-7, the determination rate is the lowest among the patterns PTA-1 to 7 regardless of the variable display result, so that the effect control pattern has an extremely low appearance frequency.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in the effect control pattern determination table B, when the variable display result is a big hit, 10 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-8 to control the effect. 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-9, 20 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-10, 25 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-11, and the effect control pattern PTA is assigned. Thirty determination values are assigned to -12. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 30 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-8, 25 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-9, and the effect control pattern PTA- Twenty determination values are assigned to 10, 15 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-11, and ten determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-12.

In this way, in the effect control pattern determination table B, when the variable display result is a big hit, the determination rate increases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12. If the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratio is lower in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each effect control pattern increases in the order of PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12 (big hit reliability: PTA-8 <PTA-9 <. PTA-10 <PTA-11 <PTA-12).

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), in the effect control pattern determination table C, when the variable display result is a big hit, five determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-13 to control the effect. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-14, 10 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-15, 15 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-16, and the effect control pattern PTA is assigned. Fifteen determination values are assigned to -17, 20 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-18, and 30 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-19. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 30 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-13, 20 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-14, and the effect control pattern PTA- 15 judgment values are assigned to 15, 15 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-16, 10 judgment values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-17, and the effect control pattern PTA-18 is assigned. Five determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-19.

In this way, in the effect control pattern determination table C, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, and PTA-18 are determined in this order. When the ratio becomes high and the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratio decreases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, and PTA-18. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each effect control pattern increases in the order of effect control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, PTA-18, and PTA-19 (big hit). Reliability: PTA-13 <PTA-14 <PTA-15 <PTA-16 <PTA-17 <PTA-18 <PTA-19).

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), in the effect control pattern determination table D, when the variable display result is a big hit, 30 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-20, and the effect control is performed. 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern PTA-21. When the variable display result is out of alignment, 70 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-20, and 30 determination values are assigned to the effect control pattern PTA-21.

In this way, in the effect control pattern determination table D, when the variable display result is a big hit, the determination ratio increases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-20 and PTA-21, and when the variable display result is out of order, the effect control pattern The decision rate is lower in the order of PTA-20 and PTA-21. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each effect control pattern increases in the order of the effect control patterns PTA-20 and PTA-21 (big hit reliability: PTA-20 <PTA-21).

In addition, each pattern of the effect control pattern PTA-1 to 21 has a pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, a pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is out of order, and a determined stop symbol "1". It has a pattern corresponding to each of "11", and when any one of the effect control patterns PTA-1 to 21 is selected, the process corresponding to the variable display result and the stop symbol in the selected pattern. A table is selected, but these details are omitted for convenience of explanation.

(Contents of variable display effect)
Next, the contents of the variable display effect executed based on these effect control patterns PTA-1 to 21 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9.

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on any of the effect control patterns PTA-1 to 21, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the display result. At a predetermined timing, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set as the reach mode. As described above, the reach mode refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. This is a mode in which the variable display is continued.

Specifically, the reach mode means any two of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R). The same decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the left and right decorative symbol display areas (5L, 5R) form part of the jackpot combination (for example, "777"), and the decorative symbol display area It is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern is continued at 5C (for example, "7 ↓ 7").

In the feature unit 052SG, three identical decorative symbols are aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed to form a big hit combination. Therefore, two of the three decorative symbols (2 out of three decorative symbols) are displayed on the predetermined effective line. Although the form in which the tempai symbol) is stopped and displayed to be a reach mode is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and n or more (“n”” decorative symbols are the same on a predetermined effective line. (2 or more) If a big hit combination is achieved by displaying the stops together, even if the n-1 decorative symbols are aligned and displayed as a stop on a predetermined effective line, the reach mode is achieved. Good. In addition, the tempai symbol is not only the "left / right" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R as described above, but also the "left / middle" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and the "middle / right" decorative symbol display. The display may be stopped in any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R such as areas 5C and 5R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the feature unit 052SG, when the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Specifically, the 11 decorative symbols from the numbers "1" to "11" are variable at high speed from above to below the predetermined effective line in ascending order of "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → ...". The (moving) high-speed variable display (also referred to as high-speed fluctuation) is started (see FIG. 9-10 (A)). The high-speed variable display is, for example, a variable display in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variable (switched) to different decorative symbols in a manner that is difficult to see or cannot be seen.

Further, after the variable display from "1" to "11" is performed, the process returns to "1" and the variable display in ascending order is repeatedly executed. The decorative design may be variably displayed in descending order of "11-> 10-> 9-> 8-> ...", or may be randomly variably displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 052SG, the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left" is displayed at a low speed at a timing when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (Also called low-speed fluctuation), the predetermined decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (B)), and then the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5R on the "right" becomes a low-speed variable display and the predetermined decoration. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The low-speed variable display is, for example, a variable display in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variable (switched) to different decorative symbols in an easily visible or visible manner.

Then, in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (or small hit fluctuation pattern), the decoration symbols of different numbers are stopped and displayed in the "left / right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the "middle" decorative symbol display. Area 5C becomes a low-speed variable display, and a predetermined decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "left / right" decorative symbol display area 5L and 5R, and only the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variablely displayed. Is a reach mode in which the above is continued (see FIG. 9-10 (C)). In the reach mode, the variable display of the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display, and the symbols are switched and displayed in ascending order from the symbol n before the tempai symbol. For example, "n" = 6, that is, "the symbol of the tempai symbol-6" indicates the symbol of "1" 6 before the tempai symbol when the tempai symbol is "7", and the tempai symbol is "3". If it is, the symbol of "8" six times before it is shown (see FIG. 9-7 (B)).

In the feature unit 052SG, in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative symbol is switched and displayed as a different decorative symbol each time the decorative symbol moves from the top to the bottom and passes through a predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is such that the decorative symbol on a predetermined effective line is switched to a different decorative symbol. Anything is fine. Further, the switching display of the decorative symbol is not only the one that switches when the decorative symbol passes on the predetermined effective line as described above, but also the transmittance of the decorative symbol displayed on the predetermined effective line. It may be one that switches to a different decorative pattern by increasing the height, or one that switches to a different decorative pattern by gradually changing the form of the decorative pattern. Further, not only the one that is instantaneously switched to a different decorative pattern but also the one that is switched to a different decorative pattern by changing stepwise may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 052SG, as an example of the identification information that can identify each of them, a form in which a decorative pattern that is decorative identification information consisting of numbers is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and identification is not limited to this. The information may be an alphabet or symbol that can identify each of them, a combination of a plurality of dot displays, a character, a pattern, or the like.

Next, the contents of the variable display effect executed based on each effect control pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (A). In FIG. 9-7 (A), for convenience, the details of the flow of the variable display effect from the start of the variable display to the reach mode of the variable display mode are omitted, and the reach mode is mainly used. It describes the flow of the variable display effect later.

When the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-1 among the effect control patterns PTA-1 to 7 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are used. After starting the variable display of the decorative symbol and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "tempai symbol-5 symbol" are placed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. , "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", "Tempai symbol-2 symbol", "Tempai symbol-1 symbol", "Same symbol as Tempai symbol" .. Then, after passing the "same symbol as the tempai symbol" on the effective line, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-8, after the decorative symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left / right" to make a reach mode, "1 →" The decorative design is variably displayed in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → ”. Then, after the decorative symbol of "7" has passed, a predetermined symbol (for example, if the variable display result is a big hit, the decorative symbol of "7", if the variable display result is out of order, the decorative symbol other than "7"). Is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-2, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "Medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol" is passed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the previous timing, and the effect A (see FIG. 9-10 (E)) described later is executed. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-3, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "Medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol" is passed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the previous timing, and the effect B (see FIG. 9-10 (F)) described later is executed. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-4, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "Medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol" is passed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the previous timing, and the effect C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)) described later is executed. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-5, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "Medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" are passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and the effect D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)) described later is executed. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When executing the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-6, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode, and then "Medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" pass on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. However, the variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the “tempai symbol-2 symbol”, and the effect E (see FIG. 9-10 (I)) described later is executed. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-7, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "Medium". On the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" High-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol as effect F at the timing after passing "the symbol of symbol-2" and "the symbol of tempai symbol-1" and before passing "the same symbol as the tempai symbol". To start. After that, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-8 among the effect control patterns PTA-8 to 12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C After starting the variable display of the decorative symbol on 5R and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "tempai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing after passing the "-5 symbol" and before the "tempai symbol-4 symbol" is passed, and the effect A described later (FIG. 9-10 (FIG. 9-10 (Fig. 9-10)) E) See). After that, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When executing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-9, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, and then "medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing of, and the effect B (see FIG. 9-10 (F)) described later is executed. After that, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-10, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing of, and the effect C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When executing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-11, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and the effect D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-12, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and the effect D (see FIG. 9-10 (I)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-13 among the effect control patterns PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to the super reach β fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C After starting the variable display of the decorative symbol on 5R and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "tempai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used as the decorative symbol. Stop display. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", "Tempai symbol-2 symbol", "Tempai symbol-" Pass in the order of "1 symbol". Then, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-14, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol at the timing of, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed after passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". It is interrupted and the effect B (see FIG. 9-10 (F)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-15, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol at the timing of, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed after passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". It is interrupted and the effect C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When executing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-16, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode, and then "medium". After passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol at the timing of, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-2" The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the "symbol", and the effect D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed to set the super reach mode, and after executing the super reach effect (not shown), the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-17, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed after passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". It is interrupted and the effect B (see FIG. 9-10 (F)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-18, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed after passing the "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and the "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol". It is interrupted and the effect C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, the super reach effect (not shown) is executed, and then the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the variable display effect is executed based on the effect control pattern PTA-19, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-2" The variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted at the timing before passing the "symbol", and the effect D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)) described later is executed. After that, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed to set the super reach mode, and after executing the super reach effect (not shown), the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-20 among the effect control patterns PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C After starting the variable display of the decorative symbol on 5R and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "tempai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used as the decorative symbol. Stop display. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. High-speed variable display of decorative symbols after passing "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing "Tempai symbol-4 symbol" After starting, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the third variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a high-speed variable manner without executing the effects A to E, and the variable display mode is set as the super reach mode. After executing the reach effect (not shown), the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When executing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-21, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode, and then "medium". "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-5 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing before passing the "tempai symbol-2 symbol", and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the second variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. High-speed variable display of decorative symbols after passing "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tempai symbol-5 symbol" and before passing "Tempai symbol-4 symbol" After starting, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the variable display is restarted, that is, the third variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach mode, and then on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol", the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a high-speed variable manner without executing the effects A to E, and the variable display mode is set as the super reach mode. After executing the reach effect (not shown), the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the feature unit 052SG, when the fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, and then sets the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the effective line to “tempai”. When the "symbol-5 symbol" has passed, one of the effects A to C as the first effect can be executed, while the "tempai symbol-" is on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. When "the symbol of 3" has passed, any of the effects D to E as the second effect can be executed.

In other words, after the variable display mode is set to the normal reach mode, when the number of symbols passing on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C becomes two, that is, when the normal reach mode is set, " When the number of decorative symbols switched and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is two, one of the effects A to C as the first effect can be executed, while the "medium" decorative symbol When the number of symbols passed on the effective line in the display area 5C is 4, that is, when the number of decorative symbols switched and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is 4, the second effect. It is possible to execute any of the effects D to E as.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10 (E) to 9-10, the effects A to C are suggestive effects suggesting that the appearance of the character C1 may result in a big hit, and the effect D is the effect in which the character C2 appears. It is a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit by doing so, and the effect E is a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit by the appearance of the character C3. Since these characters C1 to C3 are displayed using the entire display area so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. Although it is difficult to visually recognize, as shown in FIG. 9-10, a plurality of fourth symbols are variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area E1 provided at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The fourth symbol is a symbol smaller than the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbol (and) variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. While variable display is performed in synchronization with (special symbol), high-speed variable display of the symbol is always performed regardless of changes such as the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becoming the reach mode. As long as the decorative symbol and FIG. 4 are always variably displayed in synchronization, the display mode of the symbol, the combination of the stop symbols, and the like may be the same or different.

In the feature unit 052SG, the effects A to C as the first effect and the effects D and E as the second effect exemplify a form in which the characters C1 to C3 appear. It is not limited, and if it is a production different from the variable display production of the decorative pattern, the production mode of the first production and the second production can be changed in various ways, and the character does not appear such as the dialogue production and the story production. It may be a variable display effect (reach effect) in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is simply changed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6, the effect A is executed in the effect control pattern PTA-2 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the effect control pattern PTA-8 corresponding to the super reach α. The effect B is executed in the effect control pattern PTA-3 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the effect control pattern PTA-9 corresponding to the super reach α, and the effect control patterns PTA-14 and 17 corresponding to the super reach β. The effect C is executed in the effect control pattern PTA-4 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the effect control pattern PTA-10 corresponding to the super reach α, and the effect control patterns PTA-15 and 18 corresponding to the super reach β.

Further, the effect D is executed in the effect control pattern PTA-5 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control pattern PTA-11 corresponding to the super reach α, and the effect control patterns PTA-16 and 19 corresponding to the super reach β. .. The effect E is executed in the effect control pattern PTA-6 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the effect control pattern PTA-12 corresponding to the super reach α, and the effect control patterns PTA-20, 21 corresponding to the super reach γ.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), the jackpot reliability of the effect control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-1 to 7 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the effect control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, It increases in the order of PTA-4, PTA-5, PTA-6, PTA-7 (big hit reliability: PTA-1 <PTA-2 <PTA-3 <PTA-4 <PTA-5 <PTA-6 < PTA-7), the jackpot reliability of the production control patterns PTA-8 to 12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern is that of the production control patterns PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, PTA-12. The jackpot reliability is increasing in order (PTA-8 <PTA-9 <PTA-10 <PTA-11 <PTA-12), and the jackpot reliability of the production control patterns PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The degree increases in the order of production control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, PTA-18, PTA-19 (big hit reliability: PTA-13 <PTA-). 14 <PTA-15 <PTA-16 <PTA-17 <PTA-18 <PTA-19), the jackpot reliability of the effect control pattern PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is the effect control pattern PTA- It increases in the order of 20 and PTA-21 (big hit reliability: PTA-20 <PTA-21).

Production control pattern PTA-1 to 7 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern, production control pattern PTA-8 to 12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern, production control pattern PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to the super reach β fluctuation pattern, super The effect control patterns PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the reach γ fluctuation pattern are higher in the order of effect control patterns PTA-1 to 7, PTA-8 to 12, PTA-13 to 19, and PTA-20 to 21.

Therefore, the jackpot reliability in the effect control patterns PTA-1 to 7 corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation pattern is such that the effects D to E are executed rather than the effect control patterns PTA-2, 3 and 4 in which the effects A to C are executed. The effect control patterns PTA-5 and 6 are higher, and the jackpot reliability in the effect control patterns PTA-8 to 12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern is the effect control pattern PTA-8, in which the effects A to C are executed. The effect control patterns PTA-11 and 12 in which the effects D to E are executed are higher than those in 9 and 10, and the jackpot reliability in the effect control patterns PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to the super reach β fluctuation pattern is the effect B. The effect control pattern PTA-16 in which the effect D is executed is higher than the effect control patterns PTA-14 and 15 in which the effects ~ C are executed, and the effect control patterns PTA-17 in which the effects B to C are executed. The effect control pattern PTA-19 in which the effect D is executed is higher than that of 18, and the jackpot reliability in the effect control pattern PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is higher than that of the effect control pattern PTA-20. The effect control pattern PTA-21 is higher.

That is, even when an effect control pattern corresponding to any of the normal reach variation pattern, the super reach α variation pattern, the super reach β variation pattern, and the super reach γ variation pattern is selected, any of the effects A to C in the variable display effect. The percentage of big hits is higher when any of the effects D to E is executed than when the sword is executed. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of the effects A to E is higher in the order of effect A, effect B, effect C, effect D, and effect E (big hit reliability; effect A <effect B <effect C <effect D <effect E). , In the reach mode, the reach mode is more than the rate of a big hit when the effects A to C are executed when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. In the above, when the effects D to E are executed when the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the rate of a big hit is higher. Therefore, since the effects D to E as the second effect have higher jackpot reliability than the effects A to C as the first effect, the effects A to C as the first effect are "weak effects" and the second effect. The productions D to E as the production are "strong production".

On the other hand, in the reach mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs effects A to C (weak effect) as the first effect when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. One of the three types can be executed, and when the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, the effect D is performed as the second effect. It is possible to execute either of the two types of ~ E (strong production). As described above, when the effects A to C are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is lower than that when the effects D to E are executed, but the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the reach mode. The number of effect patterns (three types of effects A to C) of the first effect that can be executed when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in is the "medium" decorative symbol display area in the reach mode. Since it is larger than the number of effect patterns of the second effect (two types of effects D and E) that can be executed when the "design of Tempai symbol-3" passes on the effective line in 5C, it will eventually be given to the player. Since it is possible to make people interested in whether the effects A to C are executed in the above manner, the interest is improved.

In this way, when the variable display mode is the reach mode, when the number of symbols passing on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is the first number (for example, two), the effect A The effects D to E are executed when the number of symbols passed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C becomes the second number (for example, 4) than when ~ C is executed. It can be expected that the case will be a big hit, but when the effects A to C are executed at the timing when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. However, it may be a big hit via Super Reach, and there are more production patterns that can be executed than when the effects D to E are executed at the timing when the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes. , It is possible to improve the interest when the production develops at the timing when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.

In addition, the rate of big hits is higher when the variable display effect based on the super reach α fluctuation pattern is executed than when the variable display effect based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern is executed, and the variable based on the super reach α fluctuation pattern is executed. The rate of big hits is higher when the variable display effect based on the super reach β fluctuation pattern is executed than when the display effect is executed, and compared to when the variable display effect based on the super reach β fluctuation pattern is executed. However, the rate of big hits is higher when the variable display effect based on the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is executed.

Further, in the variable display effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the number of effect patterns that can be executed as the first effect in the reach effect after the re-variable display is executed in the pseudo-continuous effect (effects B, C / FIG. 9-9). (See) is less than the number of effect patterns that can be executed as the first effect in the reach effect before executing the revariable display in the pseudo-continuous effect (see productions A to C / FIGS. 9-8), and is re-used in the pseudo-continuous effect. When the effect B or effect C is executed in the reach effect after the variable display is executed, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state is the effect A to C in the reach effect before the revariable display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect. Is higher than the rate controlled to the jackpot game state when is executed, that is, the rate of jackpot is higher when the pseudo-continuous production is executed, so that the revariable display is executed for the player. Since it is possible to make people interested in whether the productions A to C are performed before or after, the interest is improved.

In this way, in the reach effect after executing the revariable display in the pseudo continuous effect, any one of the effects B, C, and D other than the effect A having the lowest jackpot reliability among the effects A to C can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the pseudo-continuous production.

Further, in the feature unit 052SG, since the production A, the production B, the production C, the production D, and the production E are higher in this order (big hit reliability; production A <production B <production C <production D <production E), as the second production. The effect D or effect E has a higher jackpot reliability than any of the effects A to C as the first effect, but in the reach mode, the “tempai” is on the effective line in the “medium” decorative pattern display area 5C. The average value of the jackpot reliability in the plurality of first effects that can be executed when the "symbol of symbol-5" has passed is "tempai symbol-3" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the reach mode. If it is higher than the average value of the jackpot reliability of the plurality of second effects that can be executed when "the symbol" is passed, one of the plurality of first effects is one of the plurality of second effects. The jackpot reliability may be higher than that.

In addition, the average value of the jackpot reliability of a plurality of weak effects that can be executed in the reach effect after the revariable display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in the reach effect before the revariable display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect. If it is higher than the average value of the jackpot reliability of the plurality of first effects, one of the plurality of first effects that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display in the pseudo-continuous effect. The jackpot reliability may be lower than the jackpot reliability of any one of the plurality of first effects that can be executed in the reach effect before the revariable display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes any of the effects D to E in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-10 to 12 and 14 to 19, and then in the reach mode, the "middle" decorative symbol display area. By making it difficult to visually recognize the symbols by setting the variable display mode of 5C as the high-speed variable display mode, it becomes difficult to specify the number of symbols that have passed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Can be obfuscated that was not executed.

Further, in the reach mode, when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, that is, the pseudo continuous effect is executed at the first timing when the first effect is executed. The "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passed on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, rather than the rate of big hits in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-14 to 16. When, that is, at any timing, the rate of big hits in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19 that execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the second timing when the second effect is executed is higher. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous production is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), the jackpot reliability is higher when the tempai symbol in the reach mode is an odd number than when it is an even number, and the tempai symbol in the reach mode is "7". The jackpot reliability is higher when the symbol is "7" than when it is a symbol other than. Specifically, when the tempai symbols in the reach mode are even, the effects A to C are often executed, and when the tempai symbols in the reach mode are odd or "7", the effects D to E are executed. It is often executed. In this way, the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern in which the first effects A to C are executed is executed according to whether the tempai symbol in the reach mode is an even number, an odd number, or "7". Since the ratio to be performed and the ratio to execute the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern in which the second effects D to E are executed are different, pay attention to the type of the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the reach effect. Can be done.

Further, in the effect control pattern PTA-1 and the effect control pattern PTA-7, the tempai symbol passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C without executing the effects A to E in the reach mode. Since the tempai symbol may be stopped and displayed later on the effective line and become a big hit, it can be expected that the big hit will be obtained even if the effects A to E are not executed in the reach mode. That is, in the reach mode, as the number of symbols passing on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C increases, the execution of the second effects D to E can be expected, while the "tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes. If the second effects D to E are not executed at that time, the missed symbol is often stopped and displayed, but the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed, so that the expectation for the jackpot can be maintained. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9, in the variable display based on the effect control patterns PTA-20 and 21, after the reach mode is reached in the third re-variable display, in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. When the "symbol of Tempai symbol-3" is passed, the super reach effect is developed without executing the effect E, so that it can be expected that the effect with a higher degree of expectation will be executed.

Further, the effect control patterns PTA-2 to 4, 8 to 10, 14, 15, 17, and 18 for executing the effects A to C as the first effect, and the effect control patterns PTA for executing the effects D to E as the second effect. -5, 6, 11, 12, 16, 19 to 21 are different from the effect control patterns PTA-1 and 13 in which the low-speed variable display is continued until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the reach mode. , In the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium", shift to a separate effect at a predetermined timing in the reach effect period from when the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" passes the effective line to when the "tempai symbol" passes. It is a variable display effect that ends the variable display by (branching).

Specifically, the effect control patterns PTA-1, 13 and the other effect control patterns PTA-2 to 12, 14 to 21 are "designs of Tempai symbol-5" in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". Alternatively, a common variable display effect is executed in the first period until the "symbol of Tempai symbol-3" passes through the effective line, but the effect mode in the second period thereafter is different. Therefore, since it is possible to set a plurality of types of variable display effect patterns having different effect contents for one common variable display time, it is possible to diversify the effect.

(9th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122194. From the start of variable display of symbols to the derivation display of the display result, a combination of a plurality of symbols constituting the jackpot display result (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), as described in ), It is possible to execute a reach effect that variablely displays the middle symbol while two symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed, and for example, +3 of the left and right symbols on the symbol combination effective line. There were cases where the type of production of the development destination was different depending on whether the middle symbol of the first piece passed or the +5th middle symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, since the number of the middle symbol and the effect type of the development destination have a one-to-one correspondence, the production of the development destination is performed by the number of the middle symbol passing on the symbol combination effective line. Since it is easy to predict the type, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention is
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol), an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ) Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of identification information constituting the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can set the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to the reach mode) capable of executing the reach effect for variably displaying one identification information.
The effect executing means first effect (for example, for example) when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the one identification information in the reach effect becomes the first number (for example, two). The second number (for example, four) in which the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information is larger than the first number in the case of executing the effects A to C) and in the reach effect. ), The second effect (for example, effects D and E) may be executed.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first effect is executed is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second effect is executed.
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed by the effect executing means is larger than the number of types of the second effect that can be executed by the effect executing means (for example, when the effects A to C are executed as the first effect). Compared to the case where the effects D to E are executed as the second effect, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is low, but in the reach mode, the "tempai symbol-5" is on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. The number of effect patterns (three types of effects A to C) of the first effect that can be executed when "the symbol of" passes is the "tempai symbol-" on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the reach mode. This is larger than the number of effect patterns of the second effect (two types of effects D and E) that can be executed when "3 symbols" have passed. See Fig. 9-8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is lower than when the second effect is executed, but the number of types of the first effect is changed to the number of types of the second effect. By comparing the number, it is possible to make the player interested in which kind of first production is performed, which improves the interest.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The effect executing means can make it difficult to visually recognize the one identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach effect in the second effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect control pattern PTA-. In the variable display effect based on 10-12 and 14-19, after executing any of the effects D to E, the variable display mode of the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode is set as the high-speed variable display mode. Parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times the switching display of one identification information is performed.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The effect executing means temporarily stops and displays the identification information from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-executes the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times. The specific effect can be executed at the first timing for executing the first effect and the second timing for executing the second effect.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the first timing is lower than the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the second timing (for example). In the reach mode, when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, that is, the effect control for executing the pseudo continuous effect at the first timing for executing the first effect. When the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, rather than the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the patterns PTA-14 to 16. That is, the part where the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19 that execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect is higher).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect (for example, the tempai symbol in the reach mode is an even number. Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the ratio of the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern in which the first effect A to C is executed and the effect D which is the second effect ~ E is executed The part where the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern is executed is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the effect executing means executes the first effect and the second effect after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach effect. It is possible to stop and display the combination of a plurality of identification information constituting the specific display result (for example, in the effect control pattern PTA-1 and the effect control pattern PTA-7, the effects A to E in the reach mode. After the Tempai symbol passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the Tempai symbol may be stopped and displayed on the effective line and become a big hit).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The effect setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be set to any one of a plurality of effect settings including the first effect setting and the second effect setting different from the first effect setting) is in a normal game state. (For example, a part in which the first effect mode is set in the case of low accuracy and low base state) and the second effect mode is set in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is executed) is provided.
The effect executing means can execute the reach effect regardless of which of the first effect setting and the second effect setting is set by the effect setting means.
When the second effect is set, the second effect is executed, while when the second effect is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode). , As the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the effect control pattern that can execute the effects A to C that was made executable in the first effect mode cannot be selected).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution probability of the first effect can be made different according to the effect setting, so that the interest is improved.

(10th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122194. From the start of variable display of symbols to the derivation display of the display result, a combination of a plurality of symbols constituting the jackpot display result (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), as described in ), It is possible to execute a reach effect that variablely displays the middle symbol while two symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed, and for example, +3 of the left and right symbols on the symbol combination effective line. There were cases where the type of production of the development destination was different depending on whether the middle symbol of the first piece passed or the +5th middle symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, since the number of the middle symbol and the effect type of the development destination have a one-to-one correspondence, the production of the development destination is performed by the number of the middle symbol passing on the symbol combination effective line. Since it is easy to predict the type, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention is
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol), an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ) Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of identification information constituting the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can set the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to the reach mode) capable of executing the reach effect for variably displaying one identification information.
The effect executing means is
When the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information in the reach effect becomes the first number (for example, two), the first effect (for example, the effects A to C) is performed. When it is executed and when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information in the reach effect becomes the second number (for example, four) larger than the first number. The second effect (for example, effects D and E) may be executed.
It is possible to execute a specific effect that executes the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times after temporarily stopping the display from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. Yes (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pseudo continuous effect),
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display is larger than the number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. Less,
When the first effect is executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is the ratio of the first effect controlled in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. Is higher than the rate controlled to the advantageous state when is executed (for example, in the variable display effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the first reach effect after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect is the first. The number of effect patterns that can be executed as an effect (effects B and C / see Fig. 9-9) is the number of effect patterns that can be executed as the first effect in the reach effect before executing the revariable display in the pseudo-continuous effect (effect A). ~ C / see Fig. 9-8), and the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect B or effect C is executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display in the pseudo continuous effect is pseudo. It is higher than the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state when the effects A to C are executed in the reach effect before the revariable display is executed in the continuous effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first effect is executed after the revariable display is executed, the number of types of the first effect that can be executed is small, but the first effect is executed before the revariable display is executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the case where the revariable display is performed, the player can be interested in whether the first effect is executed before or after the revariable display is executed. Therefore, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the revariable display is executed a specific number of times out of a predetermined number of times in the specific effect, the effect executing means is when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed in the reach effect becomes the second number. However, the second effect may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9, in the variable display based on the effect control patterns PTA-20 and 21, the reach mode is reached in the third revariable display. Later, even when the "tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the part that develops into a super reach effect without executing the effect E)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the revariable display is executed a specific number of times, the second effect may not be executed even when the identification information of the second number is switched and displayed in the reach effect. It can be expected that a high-quality production will be performed.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The effect executing means can make it difficult to visually recognize the one identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach effect in the second effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect control pattern PTA-. In the variable display effect based on 10-12 and 14-19, after executing any of the effects D to E, the variable display mode of the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode is set as the high-speed variable display mode. Parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times the switching display of one identification information is performed.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect at the first timing for executing the first effect and the second timing for executing the second effect.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the first timing is lower than the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the second timing (for example). In the reach mode, when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, that is, the effect control for executing the pseudo continuous effect at the first timing for executing the first effect. When the "Tempai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, rather than the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the patterns PTA-14 to 16. That is, the part where the ratio of big hits in the variable display effect based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19 that execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect is higher).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect (for example, the tempai symbol in the reach mode is an even number. Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the ratio of the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern in which the first effect A to C is executed and the effect D which is the second effect ~ E is executed The part where the variable display effect based on the effect control pattern is executed is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the effect executing means executes the first effect and the second effect after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach effect. It is possible to stop and display the combination of a plurality of identification information constituting the specific display result (for example, in the effect control pattern PTA-1 and the effect control pattern PTA-7, the effects A to E in the reach mode. After the Tempai symbol passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the Tempai symbol may be stopped and displayed on the effective line and become a big hit).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The effect setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be set to any one of a plurality of effect settings including the first effect setting and the second effect setting different from the first effect setting) is in a normal game state. (For example, a part in which the first effect mode is set in the case of low accuracy and low base state) and the second effect mode is set in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is executed) is provided.
The effect executing means can execute the reach effect regardless of which of the first effect setting and the second effect setting is set by the effect setting means.
When the second effect is set, the second effect is executed, while when the second effect is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode). , As the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the effect control pattern that can execute the effects A to C that was made executable in the first effect mode cannot be selected).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution probability of the first effect can be made different according to the effect setting, so that the interest is improved.

(Modification example of feature part 052SG)
Next, a modified example of the feature portion 052SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-11. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first effect mode when the game state is the normal state (for example, the low probability low base state), and the time saving control is executed. The second effect mode is set in the time saving state. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are different from each other, for example, in the effect mode such as the background image when the variable display effect is executed, the execution ratio and the mode of various notice effects, and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the second effect mode, as the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the effects A to C that were made executable in the first effect mode can be executed. The effect control pattern PTB corresponding to the control patterns PTA-2 to 4, 8 to 10, 14, 15, 17, and 18 cannot be selected.

That is, in the time saving state in which the time saving control is executed, there is a high probability that a variation pattern having a short variable display time is selected, and the probability variation control may be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment. It is suppressed that the effects A to C having low jackpot reliability occur frequently. In this way, since the execution probabilities of the effects A to C can be different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the effect can be suitably executed according to the set effect mode (game state). Can be done.

In the present modification, a mode in which the effect control pattern is determined so as not to execute the effects A to C when the second effect mode is set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to determine the effect control pattern for executing the effects A to C at a rate different (for example, low) from that when the first effect mode is set.

The effect mode is not limited to the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and three or more types of effect modes may be set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 enables the effect mode setting process to be executed in the effect control process process (S171), and in the effect mode setting process, a special effect (for example, a demo effect, a big hit effect, a small hit effect, a super reach effect, etc.) ) Is not executed (for example, including the state in which the game is not executed and the variable display of the symbol), in the display area other than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The effect mode change screen (not shown) may be displayed so that the player can set either the first effect mode or the second effect mode as the effect mode.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode, the effects A to C can be executed when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the reach mode. In the above, the embodiment in which the effects D to E can be executed when the "design of the tempai symbol-3" passes on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle" is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. In the reach mode, on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium", "Tempai symbol-6 symbol", "Tempai symbol-4 symbol", "Tempai symbol-2 symbol", "Tempai symbol-2 symbol" The first effect and the second effect may be executed at the timing when the "symbol of symbol-1" and the like have passed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode, the first effect can be executed at the first timing when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the reach can be executed. In the embodiment, a mode in which the second effect can be executed at the second timing when the "design of the tempai symbol-3" passes on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle" is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. In the reach mode, the first effect can be executed at multiple timings during the reach period in which the decorative symbols are switched and displayed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, or the first effect is performed at multiple timings. 2 The effect may be executable.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode, the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the timing when the "tempai symbol-n symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first effect and the second effect may be executed at the timing when the “tempai symbol −n symbol” is approaching the effective line. That is, it may be an arbitrary timing of the period until the predetermined decorative symbol is switched to a different decorative symbol, or it may be the timing when the predetermined decorative symbol is displayed.

Further, for example, the timing at which the "n symbol" is switched and displayed to the "n + 1 symbol" is, for example, in the above-described fifth embodiment, after the "n symbol" has passed on the effective line, the "n + 1 symbol" is displayed. "" May be any timing when a part of the line is approaching on the effective line, or it may be the timing when the stop display is reached. Further, when the display is switched due to the change in the form, the timing may be such that the "n + 1 symbol" is easier to see than the "n symbol", or the "n + 1 symbol" is stopped. The timing may have changed to a displayable mode.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode, the effect is produced at a plurality of timings from the "tempai symbol-6 symbol" to the passage of the "tempai symbol" on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Although any of A to E has been exemplified as a feasible form, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the reach mode, the “tempai symbol-6” is displayed on the effective line in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing from "the symbol" to "tempai symbol", "tempai symbol +1 symbol", "tempai symbol + 2 symbol" ... passes, and in the variable display of the second and third rounds ... Either of the effects A to E may be executed as the first effect or the second effect at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode of the normal reach effect, any of the effects A to E can be executed as the first effect and the second effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first effect and the second effect may be executed in the reach mode of the super reach effect. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed in the reach mode of the super reach effect. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and the fourth revariable display is executed, it is variable in a state where the jackpot symbol combinations are aligned in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R without executing the reach effect. The full rotation effect for displaying may be executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the reach mode, the first effect (effects A to C) is executed at the timing when the “tempai symbol-5 symbol” passes on the effective line in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. In the reach mode, the jackpot reliability is increased by the second effect (effects D to E) executed at the timing when the "design of Tempai symbol-3" passes on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". Although different forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of developing into the first effect and the second effect is "Tempai symbol-6 symbol" after passing through the effective line. When there are multiple timings in the reach period until the "symbol" passes, the jackpot reliability of the first effect that can be executed at the first timing and the second effect that can be executed at the second timing is at least different among the multiple timings. For example, the jackpot reliability of the first effect that can be executed at the third timing and the first effect that can be executed at the fourth timing may be the same.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effects A to C are performed as the first effect executed at the timing when the "tempai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode. As an example, in the reach mode, the effects D to E are illustrated as the second effect executed at the timing when the "design of Tempai symbol-3" passes on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". The invention is not limited to this, and the first effect may be an effect other than the effects A to C, and the second effect may be an effect other than the effects D to E. That is, the types of effects that can be executed as the first effect and the second effect may be increased. Further, a pseudo continuous effect may be included as the first effect and the second effect.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effects B and C that can be executed as the first effect in the reach mode after the pseudo continuous effect is executed are the effects A to C as the first effect in the reach mode before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Although a form that is a part of C has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as the first effect that can be executed in the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Pseudo-continuous production is executed by using a different type of production (for example, a production in which a character different from characters C1 to C3 appears) different from the productions A to C, which are the first effects that can be executed in the reach mode before the execution. It may be suggested to the player that the jackpot expectation is higher for the player.

Further, when the effects B and C are executed in the reach mode after the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the effect mode is different from the effect mode when the effects B and C are executed in the reach mode before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. It may be executed at. Specifically, when the effect B is executed in the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the motion, clothes, hair color, etc. of the appearing character C1 are different, so that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Also in the reach mode, it may be possible to execute an effect (chance up) that suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation is higher when the effect B is executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effect control pattern for executing the effects A to C as the first effect and the effect control pattern for executing the effects D to E as the second effect stop the low-speed variable display in the reach mode. An effect control pattern that continues until it is displayed An effect control pattern different from PTA-1 and 13, that is, a form in which the effect mode of the variable display effect from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is different is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 may or may not execute the first effect or the second effect in one effect control pattern, for example, a notice effect or the like. There may be.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as a reach effect, when n or more of the same decorative symbols (“n” is 2 or more) are stopped and displayed on one effective line to form a big hit combination, one Although n-1 decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line of the above and stopped and displayed to form a reach mode (so-called single line reach), the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of decorative symbols are not limited to this. N or more of the same decorative symbols (2 or more for "n") are stopped and displayed on at least one effective line of the above effective lines to form a jackpot combination, and on a plurality of effective lines. The present invention can also be applied to a device capable of simultaneously performing a reach mode (so-called double line reach, irregular line reach, etc.). Further, when the reach mode is simultaneously on a plurality of effective lines, the decorative symbol area in which the variable display is continued may be a separate decorative symbol area for each effective line, or is common to at least two or more effective lines among the plurality of effective lines. It may be a decorative pattern area. Further, in the reach effect, one effective line may be increased to a plurality of effective lines, or a plurality of effective lines may be reduced to one effective line.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the mode in which the effects A to E are executed at the same determination ratio is exemplified regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of the numerical values 1 to 6. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effects A to E may be executed at different determination ratios depending on the set value.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes and general game machines.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination or an operation mode that is advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). In addition, a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified and the probability of winning the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like are included.

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on a slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the special role is supported in a state where the combination of symbols is not aligned and carried over. Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the combination of symbols to be displayed may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), AT state, etc. It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 103 ROM
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of identification information constituting the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. Equipped with an effect execution means that can execute a reach effect that variablely displays one identification information.
The effect executing means is
In the reach effect, the first effect is executed when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of the one identification information becomes the first number, and the one identification information in the reach effect. The second effect may be executed when the number of the one identification information switched and displayed as the variable display of is the second number, which is larger than the first number.
It is possible to execute a specific effect that executes the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times after temporarily stopping the display from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. Yes,
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display is larger than the number of types of the first effect that can be executed in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. Less,
When the first effect is executed in the reach effect after executing the revariable display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is the ratio of the first effect controlled in the reach effect before executing the revariable display. A gaming machine characterized in that it is higher than the rate controlled to the advantageous state when is executed.

Images